blob: 88219cc137c38b885c45595259ae015a1134ed24 [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +03008 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
Ilan Peer94ba9272018-02-19 14:48:41 +02009 * Copyright (C) 2018 Intel Corporation
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070010 *
11 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
12 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
13 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
14 */
15
16#ifndef MAC80211_H
17#define MAC80211_H
18
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050019#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070020#include <linux/kernel.h>
21#include <linux/if_ether.h>
22#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070023#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070024#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Michal Kazior5caa3282016-05-19 10:37:51 +020025#include <net/codel.h>
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +030026#include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +020027#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070028
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040029/**
30 * DOC: Introduction
31 *
32 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
33 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
34 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
35 * drivers.
36 */
37
38/**
39 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
40 *
41 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070042 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
43 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
44 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010045 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
46 * tasklet function.
47 *
48 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070049 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070050 */
51
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040052/**
53 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070054 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040055 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
56 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
57 */
58
59/**
60 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070061 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040062 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
63 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
64 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
65 * hardware.
66 *
67 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
68 *
69 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
70 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
71 *
72 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
73 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070074 */
75
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020076/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040077 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
78 *
79 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
80 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
81 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
82 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
83 *
84 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
85 * suspend.
86 *
87 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
88 *
89 */
90
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +010091/**
92 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
93 *
94 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
95 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
96 * between different stations/interfaces.
97 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
98 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
99 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
100 *
101 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
102 * driver operation.
103 *
Johannes Bergadf8ed02018-08-31 11:31:08 +0300104 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
105 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
106 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +0100107 *
108 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
109 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
110 *
Johannes Berge7881bd52017-12-19 10:11:54 +0100111 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame, it calls
112 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it
113 * calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +0100114 *
115 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
116 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
117 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
118 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
119 * .release_buffered_frames().
120 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
121 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
122 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
123 */
124
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -0500125struct device;
126
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -0400127/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200128 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
129 *
130 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100131 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200132 */
133enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200134 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100135 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200136};
137
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200138#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
139
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200140/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800141 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
142 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
143 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
144 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
145 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
146 */
147enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
148 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
149 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
150 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
151 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
152};
153
154/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400155 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
156 *
157 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100158 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400159 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400160 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200161 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
162 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400163 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100164 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300165 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200166 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +0300167 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
168 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400169 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700170struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200171 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100172 u16 cw_min;
173 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200174 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300175 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200176 bool uapsd;
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +0300177 bool mu_edca;
178 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700179};
180
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700181struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
182 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
183 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
184 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
185 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
186};
187
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100188/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200189 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100190 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200191 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100192 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200193 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
194 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200195 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200196 */
197enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100198 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200199 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100200 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200201 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200202 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200203};
204
205/**
206 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
207 *
208 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
209 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
210 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100211 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200212 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200213 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
214 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
215 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
216 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100217 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100218 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200219 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
220 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
221 */
222struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100223 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200224 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200225
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200226 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
227
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100228 bool radar_enabled;
229
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100230 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200231};
232
233/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300234 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
235 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
236 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
237 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
238 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
239 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
240 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
241 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
242 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
243 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
244 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
245 * for changes/removal.)
246 */
247enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
248 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
249 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
250};
251
252/**
253 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
254 *
255 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
256 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
257 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
258 * done.
259 *
260 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
261 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
262 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
263 */
264struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
265 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
266 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
267 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
268};
269
270/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100271 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
272 *
273 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
274 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
275 *
276 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
277 * also implies a change in the AID.
278 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
279 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300280 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700281 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200282 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200283 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200284 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
285 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
286 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
287 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
288 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
289 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200290 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200291 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300292 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200293 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
294 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200295 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200296 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200297 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300298 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200299 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100300 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200301 * changed
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300302 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
303 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100304 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
305 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
306 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100307 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200308 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +0300309 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
310 * keep alive) changed.
Pradeep Kumar Chitrapudcbe73c2018-03-22 12:18:03 -0700311 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
Pradeep Kumar Chitrapubc847972018-10-03 20:19:20 -0700312 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fime timing reasurement request responder
313 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
Pradeep Kumar Chitrapudcbe73c2018-03-22 12:18:03 -0700314 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100315 */
316enum ieee80211_bss_change {
317 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
318 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
319 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300320 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200321 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200322 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200323 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200324 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
325 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
326 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200327 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200328 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300329 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200330 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200331 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300332 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200333 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300334 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200335 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100336 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300337 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100338 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100339 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200340 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +0300341 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24,
Pradeep Kumar Chitrapudcbe73c2018-03-22 12:18:03 -0700342 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25,
Pradeep Kumar Chitrapubc847972018-10-03 20:19:20 -0700343 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200344
345 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100346};
347
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300348/*
349 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
350 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
351 * filtering will be disabled.
352 */
353#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
354
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100355/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200356 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
357 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200358 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300359 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300360 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
361 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
362 * once each time the timeout triggers.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700363 */
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200364enum ieee80211_event_type {
365 RSSI_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200366 MLME_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300367 BAR_RX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300368 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200369};
370
371/**
372 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
373 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
374 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
375 */
376enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700377 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
378 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
379};
380
381/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200382 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200383 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
384 */
385struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
386 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
387};
388
389/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200390 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
391 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200392 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200393 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
394 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200395 */
396enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
397 AUTH_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200398 ASSOC_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200399 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
400 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200401};
402
403/**
404 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
405 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
406 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
407 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
408 */
409enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
410 MLME_SUCCESS,
411 MLME_DENIED,
412 MLME_TIMEOUT,
413};
414
415/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200416 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200417 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
418 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
419 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
420 */
421struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
422 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
423 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
424 u16 reason;
425};
426
427/**
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300428 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
429 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
430 * @tid: the tid
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300431 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300432 */
433struct ieee80211_ba_event {
434 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
435 u16 tid;
436 u16 ssn;
437};
438
439/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200440 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200441 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200442 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200443 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300444 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300445 * @u:union holding the fields above
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200446 */
447struct ieee80211_event {
448 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
449 union {
450 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200451 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300452 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200453 } u;
454};
455
456/**
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200457 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
458 *
459 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
460 *
461 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
462 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
463 */
464struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
465 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
466 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
467};
468
469/**
Randy Dunlap3453de92018-12-06 12:58:30 -0800470 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
Pradeep Kumar Chitrapubc847972018-10-03 20:19:20 -0700471 *
472 * @lci: LCI subelement content
473 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
474 * @lci_len: LCI data length
475 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
476 */
477struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
478 const u8 *lci;
479 const u8 *civicloc;
480 size_t lci_len;
481 size_t civicloc_len;
482};
483
484/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100485 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
486 *
487 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
488 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
489 *
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +0300490 * @bss_color: 6-bit value to mark inter-BSS frame, if BSS supports HE
491 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
492 * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
493 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
494 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
495 * ACK, BACK or both
496 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
497 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
498 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
Emmanuel Grumbach55ebd6e2018-12-15 11:03:04 +0200499 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
500 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100501 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200502 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
503 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530504 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100505 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
506 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Bergea1b2b452015-06-02 20:15:49 +0200507 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
508 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100509 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200510 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300511 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200512 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100513 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
514 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
515 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
516 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200517 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200518 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
519 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200520 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100521 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
522 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200523 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
524 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
525 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700526 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800527 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200528 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
529 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
530 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300531 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100532 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200533 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
534 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100535 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
536 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200537 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100538 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Avri Altman22f66892015-08-18 16:52:07 +0300539 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
540 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
541 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200542 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
Johannes Berge86abc62015-10-22 17:35:14 +0200543 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
544 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
545 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
Andrew Zaborowski2c3c5f8c2017-02-10 04:50:22 +0100546 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
547 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single
548 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
549 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200550 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300551 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
552 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
553 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
554 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100555 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
556 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
557 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200558 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200559 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
560 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
561 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300562 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
563 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200564 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300565 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
566 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200567 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100568 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
569 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
570 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
571 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
572 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
573 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100574 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200575 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
576 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
577 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +0300578 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
579 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
580 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
581 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
582 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
583 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
584 * station.
Pradeep Kumar Chitrapubc847972018-10-03 20:19:20 -0700585 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
586 * responder functionality.
587 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100588 */
589struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200590 const u8 *bssid;
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +0300591 u8 bss_color;
592 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
593 bool multi_sta_back_32bit;
594 bool uora_exists;
595 bool ack_enabled;
596 u8 uora_ocw_range;
597 u16 frame_time_rts_th;
598 bool he_support;
Emmanuel Grumbach55ebd6e2018-12-15 11:03:04 +0200599 bool twt_requester;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100600 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200601 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530602 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100603 u16 aid;
604 /* erp related data */
605 bool use_cts_prot;
606 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300607 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200608 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800609 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700610 u16 beacon_int;
611 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200612 u64 sync_tsf;
613 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100614 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100615 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300616 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +0200617 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200618 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200619 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
620 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Andrew Zaborowski2c3c5f8c2017-02-10 04:50:22 +0100621 s32 cqm_rssi_low;
622 s32 cqm_rssi_high;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100623 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200624 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300625 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100626 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200627 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200628 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300629 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300630 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
631 size_t ssid_len;
632 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200633 int txpower;
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100634 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100635 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +0200636 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
Avraham Sterne38a0172017-04-26 10:58:47 +0300637 u16 max_idle_period;
638 bool protected_keep_alive;
Pradeep Kumar Chitrapubc847972018-10-03 20:19:20 -0700639 bool ftm_responder;
640 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100641};
642
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800643/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200644 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800645 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700646 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800647 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100648 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200649 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
650 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
651 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
652 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
653 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
654 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
655 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
656 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
657 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
658 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
659 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200660 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200661 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
662 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200663 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200664 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
665 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200666 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200667 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200668 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
669 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
670 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
671 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
672 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
673 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
674 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
675 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200676 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
677 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
678 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300679 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
680 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200681 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
682 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
683 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600684 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
685 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
686 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100687 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
688 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
689 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200690 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
691 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200692 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
693 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100694 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
695 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
696 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200697 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
698 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
699 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
700 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100701 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
702 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
703 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100704 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
705 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
706 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200707 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
708 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
709 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400710 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200711 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
712 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100713 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
714 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
715 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
716 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200717 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
718 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
719 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530720 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
721 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
722 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200723 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
724 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
725 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200726 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
727 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530728 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
729 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
730 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200731 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
732 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
733 * monitor injection).
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530734 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
735 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
736 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
737 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
738 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200739 *
740 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
741 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800742 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200743enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200744 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200745 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
746 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
747 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
748 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
749 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
750 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
751 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
752 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
753 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
754 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
755 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
756 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600757 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100758 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200759 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200760 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100761 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200762 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100763 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100764 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200765 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400766 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200767 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100768 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200769 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530770 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200771 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530772 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200773 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530774 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200775};
776
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200777#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
778
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200779/**
780 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
781 *
782 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
783 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530784 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
785 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100786 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100787 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
Toke Høiland-Jørgensenbb42f2d2016-09-22 19:04:20 +0200788 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200789 *
790 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
791 */
792enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
793 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530794 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100795 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +0100796 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
Toke Høiland-Jørgensenbb42f2d2016-09-22 19:04:20 +0200797 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4),
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200798};
799
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200800/*
801 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
802 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
803 */
804#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
805 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
806 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
807 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
808 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100809 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200810 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200811 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200812
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530813/**
814 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
815 * Rate Control algorithm.
816 *
817 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
818 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
819 *
820 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
821 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
822 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
823 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
824 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100825 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
826 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530827 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
828 * Greenfield mode.
829 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100830 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
831 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
832 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530833 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
834 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
835 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
836 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
837 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200838enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
839 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
840 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
841 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
842
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100843 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200844 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
845 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
846 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
847 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
848 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100849 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
850 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
851 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800852};
853
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200854
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200855/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
856#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200857
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200858/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
859#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
860
861/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200862#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200863
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200864/* maximum number of rate table entries */
865#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
866
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200867/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200868 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200869 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200870 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
871 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200872 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200873 *
874 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
875 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
876 *
877 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
878 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200879 *
880 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
881 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
882 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
883 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300884 * information::
885 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200886 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300887 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200888 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
889 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
890 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
891 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300892 * information should then contain::
893 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200894 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +0300895 *
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200896 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
897 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200898 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200899struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
900 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100901 u16 count:5,
902 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000903} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200904
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100905#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
906
907static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
908 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
909{
910 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200911 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
912 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100913}
914
915static inline u8
916ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
917{
918 return rate->idx & 0xF;
919}
920
921static inline u8
922ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
923{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200924 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100925}
926
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200927/**
928 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200929 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200930 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
931 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
932 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
933 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
934 *
935 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200936 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200937 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100938 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700939 * @control: union for control data
940 * @status: union for status data
941 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100942 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700943 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100944 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700945 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200946 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200947 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200948struct ieee80211_tx_info {
949 /* common information */
950 u32 flags;
951 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200952
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200953 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100954
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100955 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100956
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200957 union {
958 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200959 union {
960 /* rate control */
961 struct {
962 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
963 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
964 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200965 u8 use_rts:1;
966 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200967 u8 short_preamble:1;
968 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200969 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200970 };
971 /* only needed before rate control */
972 unsigned long jiffies;
973 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200974 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berg53168212017-06-22 12:20:30 +0200975 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200976 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200977 u32 flags;
Johannes Berg53168212017-06-22 12:20:30 +0200978 codel_time_t enqueue_time;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200979 } control;
980 struct {
Johannes Berg3b79af92015-06-01 23:14:59 +0200981 u64 cookie;
982 } ack;
983 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200984 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200985 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200986 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100987 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200988 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300989 u16 tx_time;
Venkateswara Naralasettya78b26f2018-02-13 11:04:46 +0530990 bool is_valid_ack_signal;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300991 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200992 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200993 struct {
994 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
995 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200996 u8 pad[4];
997
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200998 void *rate_driver_data[
999 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1000 };
1001 void *driver_data[
1002 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001003 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001004};
1005
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03001006/**
Felix Fietkau18fb84d2017-04-26 17:11:35 +02001007 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx staus info for rate control
1008 *
1009 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1010 * @info: Basic tx status information
1011 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1012 */
1013struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1014 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1015 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1016 struct sk_buff *skb;
1017};
1018
1019/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001020 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1021 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02001022 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1023 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1024 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001025 *
1026 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1027 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1028 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1029 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1030 */
1031struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02001032 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1033 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001034 const u8 *common_ies;
1035 size_t common_ie_len;
1036};
1037
1038
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001039static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1040{
1041 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1042}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001043
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001044static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1045{
1046 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1047}
1048
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001049/**
1050 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1051 *
1052 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1053 *
1054 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1055 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1056 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1057 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1058 *
1059 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1060 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1061 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1062 */
1063static inline void
1064ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1065{
1066 int i;
1067
1068 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1069 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1070 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1071 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1072 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1073 /* clear the rate counts */
1074 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1075 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1076
1077 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +02001078 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001079 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1080 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1081 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1082}
1083
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001084
1085/**
1086 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1087 *
1088 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1089 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1090 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1091 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001092 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1093 * verification has been done by the hardware.
David Spinadelcef0acd2016-11-21 16:58:40 +02001094 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001095 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1096 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +02001097 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1098 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1099 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1100 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
Luis de Bethencourt84ea3a182016-03-18 16:09:29 +00001101 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1102 * de-duplication by itself.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -04001103 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1104 * the frame.
1105 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1106 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001107 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +01001108 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1109 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1110 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001111 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1112 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1113 * (including FCS) was received.
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001114 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1115 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +01001116 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1117 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001118 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1119 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1120 * each A-MPDU
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001121 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1122 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1123 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1124 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1125 * on this subframe
1126 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1127 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Sara Sharonf980ebc2016-02-24 11:49:45 +02001128 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1129 * done by the hardware
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001130 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1131 * processing it in any regular way.
1132 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1133 * them for sniffing purposes.
1134 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1135 * monitor interfaces.
1136 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1137 * them for sniffing purposes.
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001138 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1139 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1140 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1141 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1142 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1143 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1144 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1145 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1146 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001147 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1148 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1149 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Sara Sharonf631a772016-05-03 15:59:44 +03001150 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1151 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1152 * the first subframe.
David Spinadelcef0acd2016-11-21 16:58:40 +02001153 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1154 * be done in the hardware.
Johannes Berg7299d6f2018-02-19 14:48:39 +02001155 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1156 * frame
1157 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03001158 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1159 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1160 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1161 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1162 * - DATA3_CODING
1163 * - DATA5_GI
1164 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1165 * - DATA6_NSTS
1166 * - DATA3_STBC
1167 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1168 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1169 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
Shaul Triebitzd1332e72018-08-31 11:31:20 +03001170 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
Shaul Triebitzc3d1f872018-09-05 08:06:06 +03001171 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1172 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is
1173 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't
1174 * known the frame shouldn't be reported.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001175 */
1176enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001177 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1178 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001179 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001180 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1181 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1182 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1183 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001184 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001185 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8),
1186 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9),
1187 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10),
1188 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11),
1189 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12),
1190 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13),
1191 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14),
1192 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15),
1193 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16),
1194 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17),
1195 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18),
1196 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19),
1197 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20),
1198 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21),
1199 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22),
1200 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23),
Johannes Berg7299d6f2018-02-19 14:48:39 +02001201 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24),
1202 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25),
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03001203 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26),
1204 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27),
Shaul Triebitzd1332e72018-08-31 11:31:20 +03001205 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28),
Shaul Triebitzc3d1f872018-09-05 08:06:06 +03001206 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001207};
1208
1209/**
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001210 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001211 *
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001212 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001213 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1214 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1215 * if the driver fills this value it should add
1216 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1217 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
1218 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1219 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001220 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001221 */
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001222enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1223 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001224 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2),
1225 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3),
1226 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1227 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6),
1228 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001229};
1230
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001231#define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4
1232
1233enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1234 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1235 RX_ENC_HT,
1236 RX_ENC_VHT,
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03001237 RX_ENC_HE,
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001238};
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001239
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001240/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001241 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1242 *
1243 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1244 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001245 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001246 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +09001247 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1248 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001249 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1250 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001251 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1252 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001253 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001254 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Johannes Berg4352a4d2015-12-08 16:04:35 +02001255 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1256 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001257 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1258 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1259 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001260 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1261 * values were filled.
1262 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1263 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001264 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001265 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001266 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
Johannes Berg8613c942017-04-26 13:51:41 +02001267 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001268 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001269 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1270 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001271 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03001272 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1273 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1274 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +02001275 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001276 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1277 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1278 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Shaul Triebitzc3d1f872018-09-05 08:06:06 +03001279 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001280 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001281struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1282 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg162dd6a2016-02-23 23:05:06 +02001283 u64 boottime_ns;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001284 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001285 u32 ampdu_reference;
Johannes Berg7fdd69c2017-04-26 11:13:00 +02001286 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001287 u16 freq;
Johannes Bergda6a4352017-04-26 12:14:59 +02001288 u8 enc_flags;
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03001289 u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1290 u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001291 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg8613c942017-04-26 13:51:41 +02001292 u8 nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001293 u8 rx_flags;
1294 u8 band;
1295 u8 antenna;
1296 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001297 u8 chains;
1298 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001299 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Shaul Triebitzc3d1f872018-09-05 08:06:06 +03001300 u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001301};
1302
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001303/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001304 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1305 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1306 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1307 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1308 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1309 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1310 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1311 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1312 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1313 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1314 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1315 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1316 * @data field.
1317 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1318 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1319 * length
1320 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1321 *
1322 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1323 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1324 * data.
1325 */
1326struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1327 u32 present;
1328 u8 align;
1329 u8 oui[3];
1330 u8 subns;
1331 u8 pad;
1332 u16 len;
1333 u8 data[];
1334} __packed;
1335
1336/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001337 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1338 *
1339 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1340 *
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001341 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1342 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1343 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001344 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1345 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1346 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1347 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1348 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1349 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1350 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001351 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1352 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1353 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1354 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1355 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001356 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1357 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001358 */
1359enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001360 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001361 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001362 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001363 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001364};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001365
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001366
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001367/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001368 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1369 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001370 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001371 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001372 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001373 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001374 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001375 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001376 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001377 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001378 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1379 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001380 */
1381enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001382 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001383 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea02009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001384 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001385 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001386 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1387 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1388 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001389 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001390};
1391
1392/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001393 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1394 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001395 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1396 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1397 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1398 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1399 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001400 */
1401enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1402 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1403 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1404 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1405 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1406
1407 /* keep last */
1408 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1409};
1410
1411/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001412 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1413 *
1414 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1415 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001416 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1417 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001418 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001419 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1420 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1421 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001422 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1423 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1424 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1425 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001426 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1427 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001428 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001429 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001430 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001431 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001432 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001433 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1434 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001435 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001436 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1437 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001438 *
1439 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1440 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001441 * configured for an HT channel.
1442 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1443 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001444 */
1445struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001446 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001447 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001448
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001449 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001450 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001451
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001452 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1453
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001454 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001455 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001456 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001457};
1458
1459/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001460 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1461 *
1462 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1463 * operation.
1464 *
1465 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1466 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1467 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1468 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001469 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1470 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001471 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1472 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001473 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001474 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1475 */
1476struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1477 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001478 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001479 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001480 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001481 u8 count;
1482};
1483
1484/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001485 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1486 *
1487 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1488 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001489 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1490 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1491 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1492 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001493 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1494 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1495 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1496 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001497 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1498 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1499 * this is not pure P2P vif.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001500 */
1501enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1502 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001503 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001504 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001505 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001506};
1507
1508/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001509 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1510 *
1511 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1512 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1513 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001514 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001515 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1516 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001517 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001518 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1519 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001520 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1521 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1522 * for read access.
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001523 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001524 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1525 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1526 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1527 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001528 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1529 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001530 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1531 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1532 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1533 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1534 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001535 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001536 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001537 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001538 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1539 * interface.
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001540 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001541 * sizeof(void \*).
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001542 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Manikanta Pubbisetty21a5d4c2018-07-11 00:12:53 +05301543 * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1544 * protected by fq->lock.
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001545 */
1546struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001547 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001548 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Michael Brauna3e2f4b2016-10-15 13:28:19 +02001549 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001550 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001551 bool csa_active;
Sara Sharonb5a33d52016-02-16 12:48:18 +02001552 bool mu_mimo_owner;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001553
1554 u8 cab_queue;
1555 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1556
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001557 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1558
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001559 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1560
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001561 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001562
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001563#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1564 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1565#endif
1566
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001567 unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1568
Manikanta Pubbisetty21a5d4c2018-07-11 00:12:53 +05301569 bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1570
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001571 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001572 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001573};
1574
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001575static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1576{
1577#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001578 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001579#endif
1580 return false;
1581}
1582
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001583/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001584 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1585 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1586 *
1587 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1588 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1589 *
1590 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1591 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1592 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1593 */
1594struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1595
1596/**
Emmanuel Grumbachdc5a1ad2015-03-12 08:53:24 +02001597 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1598 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1599 *
1600 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1601 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1602 *
1603 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1604 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1605 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1606 */
1607struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1608
1609/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001610 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1611 *
1612 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1613 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1614 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001615 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1616 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001617 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1618 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001619 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1620 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1621 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001622 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1623 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001624 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001625 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1626 * (MFP) to be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001627 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001628 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001629 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001630 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1631 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1632 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001633 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1634 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1635 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1636 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1637 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1638 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1639 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001640 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001641 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001642 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001643 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1644 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1645 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
David Spinadel9de18d82017-12-01 13:50:52 +02001646 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1647 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1648 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001649 */
1650enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001651 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1652 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1653 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1654 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1655 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1656 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1657 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001658 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
David Spinadel9de18d82017-12-01 13:50:52 +02001659 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001660};
1661
1662/**
1663 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1664 *
1665 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1666 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1667 *
1668 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1669 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001670 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001671 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001672 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1673 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001674 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1675 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1676 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001677 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1678 * data block:
1679 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1680 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1681 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001682 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1683 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001684 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001685struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Bergdb388a52015-06-01 15:36:51 +02001686 atomic64_t tx_pn;
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001687 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001688 u8 icv_len;
1689 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001690 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001691 s8 keyidx;
David Spinadel9de18d82017-12-01 13:50:52 +02001692 u16 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001693 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001694 u8 key[0];
1695};
1696
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001697#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1698
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001699#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1700#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1701
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001702/**
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001703 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1704 *
1705 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1706 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1707 * reverse order than in packet)
1708 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1709 * reverse order than in packet)
1710 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1711 * reverse order than in packet)
1712 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1713 * reverse order than in packet)
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001714 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001715 */
1716struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1717 union {
1718 struct {
1719 u32 iv32;
1720 u16 iv16;
1721 } tkip;
1722 struct {
1723 u8 pn[6];
1724 } ccmp;
1725 struct {
1726 u8 pn[6];
1727 } aes_cmac;
1728 struct {
1729 u8 pn[6];
1730 } aes_gmac;
1731 struct {
1732 u8 pn[6];
1733 } gcmp;
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001734 struct {
1735 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1736 u8 seq_len;
1737 } hw;
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001738 };
1739};
1740
1741/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001742 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1743 *
1744 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1745 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1746 *
1747 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1748 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1749 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1750 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1751 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1752 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1753 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1754 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1755 * key_idx value calculation:
1756 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1757 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1758 */
1759struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1760 u32 cipher;
1761 u16 iftype;
1762 u8 hdr_len;
1763 u8 pn_len;
1764 u8 pn_off;
1765 u8 key_idx_off;
1766 u8 key_idx_mask;
1767 u8 key_idx_shift;
1768 u8 mic_len;
1769};
1770
1771/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001772 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1773 *
1774 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1775 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1776 *
1777 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1778 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1779 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001780enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001781 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001782};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001783
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001784/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001785 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1786 *
1787 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1788 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1789 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1790 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1791 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1792 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1793 */
1794enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1795 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1796 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1797 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1798 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1799 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1800 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1801};
1802
1803/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001804 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1805 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1806 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1807 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1808 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1809 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1810 *
1811 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1812 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1813 */
1814enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1815 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1816 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1817 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1818 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1819};
1820
1821/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001822 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1823 *
1824 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001825 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001826 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1827 */
1828struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1829 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1830 struct {
1831 s8 idx;
1832 u8 count;
1833 u8 count_cts;
1834 u8 count_rts;
1835 u16 flags;
1836 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1837};
1838
1839/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001840 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1841 *
1842 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1843 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1844 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1845 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1846 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001847 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001848 *
1849 * @addr: MAC address
1850 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001851 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001852 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1853 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03001854 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
Maxim Altshul480dd462016-08-22 17:14:04 +03001855 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1856 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1857 * Can be modified by driver.
Johannes Berg527871d2015-03-21 08:09:55 +01001858 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1859 * otherwise always false)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001860 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03001861 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001862 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
Emmanuel Grumbachf438ceb2016-10-18 23:12:12 +03001863 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
1864 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001865 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001866 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001867 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1868 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1869 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1870 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001871 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001872 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001873 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001874 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1875 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301876 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001877 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1878 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1879 * unlimited.
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001880 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001881 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
Sara Sharonedba6bd2018-09-05 08:06:10 +03001882 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
Johannes Bergadf8ed02018-08-31 11:31:08 +03001883 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
1884 * the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001885 */
1886struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02001887 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001888 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1889 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001890 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001891 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03001892 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
1893 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001894 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001895 u8 uapsd_queues;
1896 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001897 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001898 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001899 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001900 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001901 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001902 bool tdls_initiator;
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301903 bool mfp;
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001904 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
Johannes Berg57eeb202017-01-13 11:12:01 +01001905
1906 /**
1907 * @max_amsdu_len:
1908 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
1909 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
1910 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
1911 *
1912 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
1913 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
1914 * * If the skb is not part of a BA aggreement, the A-MSDU maximal
1915 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
1916 *
1917 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
1918 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
1919 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
1920 */
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001921 u16 max_amsdu_len;
Ayala Beker52cfa1d2016-03-17 15:41:39 +02001922 bool support_p2p_ps;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01001923 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
Sara Sharonedba6bd2018-09-05 08:06:10 +03001924 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001925
Johannes Bergadf8ed02018-08-31 11:31:08 +03001926 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001927
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001928 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001929 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001930};
1931
1932/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001933 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1934 *
1935 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301936 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001937 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001938 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1939 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1940 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001941enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001942 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1943};
1944
1945/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001946 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1947 *
1948 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1949 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1950 */
1951struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1952 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1953};
1954
1955/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001956 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
1957 *
1958 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
1959 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
Johannes Bergadf8ed02018-08-31 11:31:08 +03001960 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
1961 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001962 * @ac: the AC for this queue
Johannes Bergf8bdbb52015-05-20 15:04:53 +02001963 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001964 *
1965 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
1966 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
1967 */
1968struct ieee80211_txq {
1969 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1970 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1971 u8 tid;
1972 u8 ac;
1973
1974 /* must be last */
1975 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1976};
1977
1978/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001979 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1980 *
1981 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1982 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1983 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1984 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1985 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1986 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001987 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1988 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1989 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1990 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1991 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1992 * algorithm.
1993 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1994 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1995 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1996 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1997 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1998 * CCK frames.
1999 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002000 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2001 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2002 * the FCS at the end.
2003 *
2004 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2005 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2006 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2007 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2008 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2009 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07002010 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002011 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02002012 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2013 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2014 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2015 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2016 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02002017 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2018 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2019 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2020 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2021 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03002022 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2023 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2024 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05302025 *
2026 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2027 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02002028 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002029 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2030 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2031 *
2032 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2033 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2034 * stack support for dynamic PS.
2035 *
2036 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2037 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02002038 *
2039 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2040 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002041 *
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05302042 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2043 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2044 * the stack.
2045 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02002046 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002047 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2048 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02002049 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02002050 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2051 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2052 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02002053 *
2054 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2055 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2056 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2057 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2058 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2059 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02002060 *
2061 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2062 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2063 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2064 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2065 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2066 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03002067 *
2068 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2069 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2070 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02002071 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02002072 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2073 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2074 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002075 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07002076 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2077 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2078 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2079 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002080 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2081 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2082 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2083 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2084 * supported cipher suites.
2085 *
Johannes Berg17c18bf2015-03-21 15:25:43 +01002086 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2087 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2088 * for frames.
2089 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002090 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2091 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2092 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2093 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02002094 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02002095 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2096 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2097 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02002098 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2099 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2100 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01002101 *
2102 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2103 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03002104 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02002105 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2106 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2107 * using aggregation for such frames.)
2108 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03002109 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2110 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2111 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2112 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02002113 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03002114 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2115 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2116 *
Johannes Bergc526a462015-06-02 20:32:00 +02002117 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002118 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002119 *
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03002120 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2121 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2122 *
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03002123 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2124 * within A-MPDU.
2125 *
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02002126 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2127 * for sent beacons.
2128 *
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02002129 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2130 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2131 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2132 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2133 *
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002134 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2135 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2136 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2137 * timeout.
2138 *
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002139 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2140 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2141 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002142 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2143 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2144 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2145 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2146 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2147 *
2148 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2149 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2150 *
Rajkumar Manoharane8a24cd2016-09-14 12:48:32 +05302151 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2152 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2153 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2154 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2155 *
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03002156 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2157 * The stack will not do fragmentation.
2158 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2159 *
Yingying Tange2fb1b82017-10-24 16:51:10 +08002160 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2161 * TDLS links.
2162 *
Ilan Peer94ba9272018-02-19 14:48:41 +02002163 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2164 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2165 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2166 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2167 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2168 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2169 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
Randy Dunlapd1361b32018-04-26 18:17:31 -07002170 *
Ben Caradoc-Davies7c181f42018-03-19 12:57:44 +13002171 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2172 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
Ilan Peer94ba9272018-02-19 14:48:41 +02002173 *
Johannes Bergadf8ed02018-08-31 11:31:08 +03002174 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2175 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2176 *
Johannes Berg09b4a4f2018-08-31 11:31:17 +03002177 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2178 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2179 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2180 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2181 * See also the documentation for that flag.
2182 *
Sara Sharon0eeb2b62018-09-05 08:06:09 +03002183 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2184 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2185 * TXQs to start with.
2186 *
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002187 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002188 */
2189enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002190 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2191 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2192 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2193 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2194 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2195 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2196 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2197 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2198 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2199 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2200 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2201 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2202 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2203 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2204 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2205 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2206 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2207 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2208 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2209 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2210 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2211 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2212 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2213 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2214 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2215 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2216 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2217 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2218 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03002219 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03002220 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02002221 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02002222 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002223 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
Johannes Bergc9c59622016-03-31 20:02:11 +03002224 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002225 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2226 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
Rajkumar Manoharane8a24cd2016-09-14 12:48:32 +05302227 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03002228 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
Yingying Tange2fb1b82017-10-24 16:51:10 +08002229 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
Ilan Peer94ba9272018-02-19 14:48:41 +02002230 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
Ben Caradoc-Davies7c181f42018-03-19 12:57:44 +13002231 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
Johannes Bergadf8ed02018-08-31 11:31:08 +03002232 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
Johannes Berg09b4a4f2018-08-31 11:31:17 +03002233 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
Sara Sharon0eeb2b62018-09-05 08:06:09 +03002234 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002235
2236 /* keep last, obviously */
2237 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002238};
2239
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002240/**
2241 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002242 *
2243 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2244 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2245 *
2246 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2247 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2248 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002249 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2250 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002251 *
2252 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2253 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002254 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2255 * along with this structure.
2256 *
2257 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2258 *
2259 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2260 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2261 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002262 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2263 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002264 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02002265 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002266 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002267 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002268 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002269 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002270 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002271 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02002272 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2273 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2274 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002275 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2276 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2277 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002278 *
2279 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2280 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002281 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2282 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002283 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2284 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002285 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2286 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002287 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002288 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2289 * can handle.
2290 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2291 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002292 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002293 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002294 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2295 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2296 * aggregation.
2297 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2298 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2299 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002300 *
2301 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03002302 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2303 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2304 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2305 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2306 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002307 *
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002308 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2309 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2310 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002311 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2312 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002313 *
2314 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2315 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002316 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002317 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002318 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002319 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2320 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002321 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002322 *
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03002323 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2324 *
Johannes Berg99ee7ca2016-08-29 23:25:17 +03002325 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2326 * 'units_pos' member is set to a non-negative value it must be set to
2327 * a combination of a IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2328 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value, and then the timestamp
2329 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2330 * device_timestamp. If the 'accuracy' member is non-negative, it's put
2331 * into the accuracy radiotap field and the accuracy known flag is set.
2332 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002333 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
Johannes Berg680a0da2015-04-13 16:58:25 +02002334 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2335 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002336 *
2337 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2338 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2339 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2340 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2341 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2342 * neither enabled.
2343 *
2344 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2345 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2346 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002347 *
2348 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2349 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2350 * supported by HW.
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03002351 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2352 * device.
Wen Gong70e53662018-08-08 18:40:01 +08002353 *
2354 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2355 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2356 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002357 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002358struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002359 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002360 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002361 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002362 void *priv;
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002363 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002364 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002365 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002366 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002367 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002368 int chanctx_data_size;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002369 int txq_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002370 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002371 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002372 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002373 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002374 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002375 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03002376 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2377 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Felix Fietkau6e0456b2016-03-03 22:59:00 +01002378 u8 max_tx_fragments;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002379 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002380 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002381 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Johannes Berg99ee7ca2016-08-29 23:25:17 +03002382 struct {
2383 int units_pos;
2384 s16 accuracy;
2385 } radiotap_timestamp;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002386 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002387 u8 uapsd_queues;
2388 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002389 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2390 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03002391 u8 max_nan_de_entries;
Wen Gong70e53662018-08-08 18:40:01 +08002392 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002393};
2394
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002395static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2396 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2397{
2398 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2399}
2400#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2401
2402static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2403 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2404{
2405 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2406}
2407#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2408
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002409/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002410 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2411 *
2412 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2413 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2414 */
2415struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2416 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2417
2418 /* Keep last */
2419 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2420};
2421
2422/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02002423 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2424 *
2425 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2426 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2427 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2428 * @status: channel-switch response status
2429 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2430 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2431 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2432 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2433 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2434 */
2435struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2436 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2437 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2438 u8 action_code;
2439 u32 status;
2440 u32 timestamp;
2441 u16 switch_time;
2442 u16 switch_timeout;
2443 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2444 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2445};
2446
2447/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002448 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2449 *
2450 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2451 *
2452 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2453 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2454 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2455 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2456 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002457 *
2458 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002459 */
2460struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2461
2462/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002463 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2464 *
2465 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2466 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2467 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002468static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2469{
2470 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2471}
2472
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002473/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002474 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002475 *
2476 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2477 * @addr: the address to set
2478 */
Bjorn Andersson538dc902015-12-24 00:33:26 -08002479static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002480{
2481 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2482}
2483
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002484static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2485ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002486 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002487{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05002488 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002489 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002490 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002491}
2492
2493static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2494ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002495 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002496{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002497 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002498 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002499 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002500}
2501
2502static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2503ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002504 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002505{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002506 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002507 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002508 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002509}
2510
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002511/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01002512 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2513 * @hw: the hardware
2514 * @skb: the skb
2515 *
2516 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2517 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2518 */
2519void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2520
2521/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002522 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002523 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002524 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2525 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2526 *
2527 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2528 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002529 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2530 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2531 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002532 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2533 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2534 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002535 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2536 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2537 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2538 *
2539 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2540 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2541 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2542 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2543 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002544 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2545 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2546 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2547 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2548 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002549 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2550 *
2551 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2552 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2553 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2554 * based on the receive flags.
2555 *
2556 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2557 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2558 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2559 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002560 *
2561 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2562 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2563 * handler.
2564 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03002565 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002566 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2567 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002568 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002569 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002570 *
2571 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2572 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2573 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Alexander Wetzel62872a92018-08-31 15:00:38 +02002574 *
2575 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2576 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to to following
2577 * requirements:
2578 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to
2579 mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been
2580 completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key,
2581 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2582 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2583 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2584 encrypted with the new key and
2585 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2586 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002587 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002588
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002589/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002590 * DOC: Powersave support
2591 *
2592 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2593 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002594 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2595 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2596 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2597 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2598 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2599 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2600 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2601 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002602 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002603 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2604 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2605 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002606 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2607 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002608 *
2609 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2610 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2611 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002612 *
2613 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2614 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2615 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2616 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002617 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2618 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002619 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002620 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002621 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2622 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2623 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2624 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2625 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2626 * periods.
2627 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002628 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002629 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2630 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2631 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2632 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2633 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2634 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2635 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2636 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2637 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2638 *
2639 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01002640 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002641 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002642 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2643 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2644 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2645 *
2646 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2647 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002648 */
2649
2650/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002651 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2652 *
2653 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002654 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002655 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2656 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2657 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2658 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2659 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2660 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002661 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2662 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002663 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2664 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2665 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2666 *
2667 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2668 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2669 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2670 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2671 *
2672 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2673 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2674 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2675 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
Jani Nikulab4f7f4a2016-10-21 15:57:23 +03002676 *
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002677 * - a list of information element IDs
2678 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2679 *
2680 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2681 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2682 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2683 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2684 * vendor information elements.
2685 *
2686 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2687 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2688 *
2689 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2690 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2691 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2692 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2693 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2694 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2695 *
2696 *
2697 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2698 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2699 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2700 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2701 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2702 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2703 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2704 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2705 *
2706 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2707 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2708 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002709 */
2710
2711/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002712 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2713 *
2714 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2715 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2716 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2717 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2718 *
2719 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2720 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2721 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2722 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2723 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2724 * hardware flags.
2725 *
2726 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2727 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2728 * turned off otherwise.
2729 *
2730 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2731 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2732 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2733 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2734 */
2735
2736/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002737 * DOC: Frame filtering
2738 *
2739 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2740 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2741 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2742 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2743 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2744 *
2745 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2746 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2747 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2748 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002749 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2750 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2751 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2752 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2753 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2754 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2755 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002756 *
2757 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2758 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2759 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2760 * or dropped.
2761 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002762 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2763 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2764 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2765 * the flag, but not clear it.
2766 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2767 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2768 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2769 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2770 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2771 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2772 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2773 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002774 */
2775
2776/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002777 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2778 *
2779 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2780 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2781 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2782 *
2783 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2784 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2785 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2786 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2787 * the driver code.
2788 *
2789 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2790 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2791 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2792 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2793 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2794 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2795 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2796 *
2797 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2798 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2799 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2800 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2801 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2802 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2803 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2804 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2805 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2806 * @sta_notify callback.
2807 *
2808 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2809 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2810 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2811 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2812 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2813 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2814 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002815 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002816 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2817 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2818 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2819 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2820 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2821 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2822 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002823 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2824 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2825 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002826 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2827 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2828 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2829 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2830 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2831 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2832 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2833 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2834 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2835 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2836 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2837 *
2838 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2839 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2840 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2841 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2842 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2843 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2844 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2845 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2846 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2847 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002848 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002849 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2850 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2851 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2852 *
2853 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2854 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2855 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2856 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2857 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002858 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002859 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2860 *
2861 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2862 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2863 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2864 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002865 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002866 *
2867 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2868 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2869 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2870 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002871 */
2872
2873/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002874 * DOC: HW queue control
2875 *
2876 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2877 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2878 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2879 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2880 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2881 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2882 *
2883 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2884 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2885 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2886 *
2887 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2888 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2889 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2890 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2891 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2892 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2893 * the hardware queue.
2894 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2895 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2896 *
2897 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2898 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2899 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2900 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2901 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2902 *
2903 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2904 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2905 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2906 * off-channel queue: 9
2907 *
2908 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2909 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2910 *
2911 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2912 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2913 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2914 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2915 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2916 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2917 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2918 *
2919 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2920 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2921 *
2922 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2923 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2924 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2925 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2926 */
2927
2928/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002929 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2930 *
2931 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2932 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2933 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2934 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2935 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002936 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2937 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2938 * multicast address.
2939 *
2940 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2941 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2942 *
2943 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2944 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2945 *
2946 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2947 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2948 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2949 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2950 * honour this flag if possible.
2951 *
Johannes Bergdf140462015-04-22 14:40:58 +02002952 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
2953 * station
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002954 *
2955 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002956 *
Jakub Kicinskic2d39552015-06-02 21:10:13 +02002957 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002958 *
2959 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002960 */
2961enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002962 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2963 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2964 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2965 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2966 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2967 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002968 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002969 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002970};
2971
2972/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002973 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2974 *
2975 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2976 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002977 *
2978 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2979 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002980 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002981 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2982 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002983 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2984 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2985 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002986 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002987 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2988 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2989 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2990 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2991 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2992 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2993 * session is gone and removes the station.
2994 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2995 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2996 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2997 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002998 */
2999enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3000 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3001 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02003002 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02003003 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3004 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3005 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01003006 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003007};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003008
3009/**
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003010 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3011 *
3012 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3013 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3014 * @tid: tid of the BA session
3015 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3016 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3017 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3018 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3019 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3020 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3021 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3022 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3023 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3024 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3025 */
3026struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3027 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3028 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3029 u16 tid;
3030 u16 ssn;
Luca Coelho41cbb0f2018-06-09 09:14:44 +03003031 u16 buf_size;
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003032 bool amsdu;
3033 u16 timeout;
3034};
3035
3036/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003037 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3038 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02003039 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3040 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003041 */
3042enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3043 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02003044 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003045};
3046
3047/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003048 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3049 *
3050 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01003051 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3052 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3053 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003054 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02003055 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3056 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3057 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01003058 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3059 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003060 */
3061enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3062 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
3063 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02003064 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01003065 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003066};
3067
3068/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003069 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3070 *
3071 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3072 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3073 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
3074 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3075 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3076 *
3077 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3078 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3079 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
3080 */
3081enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3082 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3083 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3084};
3085
3086/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003087 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
3088 *
3089 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3090 * reconfiguration type was completed.
3091 *
3092 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3093 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3094 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3095 * of wowlan configuration)
3096 */
3097enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3098 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3099 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3100};
3101
3102/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003103 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3104 *
3105 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3106 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3107 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3108 *
3109 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3110 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3111 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02003112 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01003113 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01003114 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003115 *
3116 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3117 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3118 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3119 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3120 * or zero.
3121 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3122 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3123 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003124 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003125 *
3126 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3127 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3128 * it must turn off frame reception.)
3129 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04003130 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3131 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003132 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003133 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003134 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3135 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3136 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3137 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3138 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02003139 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3140 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3141 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3142 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003143 *
3144 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3145 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3146 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3147 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3148 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3149 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02003150 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3151 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3152 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3153 * in suspend().
3154 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003155 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04003156 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003157 * and @stop must be implemented.
3158 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3159 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3160 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
3161 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3162 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003163 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003164 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003165 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3166 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3167 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3168 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3169 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3170 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003171 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3172 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3173 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
3174 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3175 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3176 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3177 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003178 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003179 *
3180 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3181 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003182 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003183 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003184 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003185 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3186 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3187 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3188 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3189 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003190 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3191 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003192 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003193 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3194 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3195 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3196 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003197 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3198 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003199 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003200 *
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003201 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3202 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3203 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3204 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3205 * which flags are changed.
3206 * This callback can sleep.
3207 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07003208 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003209 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003210 *
3211 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003212 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
3213 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003214 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003215 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003216 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003217 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003218 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3219 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3220 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02003221 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003222 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003223 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3224 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3225 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3226 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3227 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3228 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003229 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3230 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3231 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3232 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003233 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01003234 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02003235 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3236 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a54b2009-04-01 11:58:36 +02003237 * that power save is disabled.
3238 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3239 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3240 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3241 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3242 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3243 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3244 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Johannes Berge9da68d2018-10-18 10:35:47 +02003245 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3246 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3247 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3248 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3249 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003250 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003251 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003252 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3253 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3254 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3255 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3256 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3257 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3258 * The callback can sleep.
3259 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003260 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3261 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3262 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3263 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3264 *
3265 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003266 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003267 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003268 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3269 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003270 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3271 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3272 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003273 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003274 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3275 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3276 * this notification.
3277 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003278 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003279 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3280 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003281 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003282 *
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003283 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3284 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3285 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003286 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003287 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003288 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
Sara Sharonf3fe4e92016-10-18 23:12:11 +03003289 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3290 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3291 * should be set as well.
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003292 * The callback can sleep.
3293 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003294 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003295 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003296 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003297 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3298 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3299 *
3300 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003301 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3302 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3303 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3304 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3305 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003306 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303307 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3308 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
Johannes Bergc7e9dbc2016-09-14 10:03:00 +02003309 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3310 * callback can sleep.
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303311 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003312 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003313 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3314 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3315 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01003316 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003317 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3318 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3319 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3320 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003321 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3322 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3323 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3324 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3325 * The callback can sleep.
3326 *
3327 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3328 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3329 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3330 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3331 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003332 * The callback can sleep.
3333 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003334 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3335 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3336 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3337 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3338 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3339 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3340 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003341 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3342 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3343 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003344 *
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003345 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3346 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3347 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3348 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3349 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3350 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3351 * The callback can sleep.
3352 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003353 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02003354 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003355 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003356 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003357 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003358 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003359 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003360 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003361 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003362 *
3363 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02003364 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003365 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003366 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003367 *
Pedersen, Thomas354d3812016-09-28 16:56:28 -07003368 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3369 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3370 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3371 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3372 * The callback can sleep.
3373 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003374 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3375 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3376 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3377 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003378 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003379 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003380 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3381 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3382 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003383 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003384 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02003385 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07003386 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3387 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003388 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3389 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3390 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003391 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003392 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003393 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3394 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003395 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3396 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3397 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003398 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003399 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3400 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003401 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01003402 *
3403 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003404 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3405 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3406 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3407 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003408 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003409 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003410 *
3411 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3412 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3413 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3414 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003415 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09003416 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3417 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3418 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3419 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3420 *
3421 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003422 *
3423 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3424 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3425 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3426 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3427 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3428 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003429 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003430 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3431 * must be accepted in this case.
3432 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003433 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3434 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003435 *
3436 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3437 *
3438 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303439 *
3440 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3441 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303442 *
3443 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3444 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3445 * The callback can sleep.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003446 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3447 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +03003448 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003449 *
3450 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3451 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3452 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3453 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09003454 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003455 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3456 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3457 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3458 * more-data bit must always be set.
3459 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3460 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee192011-09-29 16:04:35 +02003461 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3462 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3463 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3464 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3465 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3466 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003467 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3468 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3469 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02003470 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3471 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003472 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003473 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003474 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003475 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3476 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3477 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01003478 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003479 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3480 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3481 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3482 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003483 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003484 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003485 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3486 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3487 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003488 *
3489 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3490 *
3491 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3492 *
3493 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3494 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3495 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003496 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3497 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3498 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3499 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3500 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3501 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3502 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3503 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3504 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
Ilan Peer94ba9272018-02-19 14:48:41 +02003505 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3506 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3507 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003508 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3509 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
Ilan Peerd4e36e52018-04-20 13:49:25 +03003510 * If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the
3511 * duration for which the operation is requested.
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003512 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003513 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003514 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3515 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3516 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3517 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3518 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3519 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3520 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3521 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3522 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003523 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303524 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003525 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303526 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003527 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3528 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3529 * channel context with different settings
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303530 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003531 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3532 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303533 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003534 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3535 * unbound from vif.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303536 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003537 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3538 * another, as specified in the list of
3539 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3540 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303541 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003542 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003543 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3544 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3545 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3546 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3547 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3548 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3549 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003550 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003551 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3552 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3553 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3554 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3555 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01003556 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003557 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3558 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3559 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003560 *
3561 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3562 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3563 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003564 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003565 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3566 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003567 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003568 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003569 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3570 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003571 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3572 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
Masahiro Yamada9332ef92017-02-27 14:28:47 -08003573 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003574 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003575 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3576 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3577 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003578 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003579 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3580 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3581 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3582 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003583 *
3584 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3585 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3586 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003587 *
3588 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3589 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003590 *
3591 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3592 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3593 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3594 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3595 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3596 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3597 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3598 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3599 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003600 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3601 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3602 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3603 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3604 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3605 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3606 * the function call.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003607 *
3608 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003609 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3610 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3611 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3612 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
Ayala Beker708d50e2016-09-20 17:31:14 +03003613 *
3614 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3615 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
Ayala Beker5953ff62016-09-20 17:31:19 +03003616 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3617 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3618 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3619 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3620 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3621 * changed parameters.
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03003622 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3623 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3624 * this call.
3625 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3626 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3627 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
Sara Sharon9739fe22018-09-05 08:06:11 +03003628 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
3629 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
3630 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
3631 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
Pradeep Kumar Chitrapubc847972018-10-03 20:19:20 -07003632 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
3633 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
Johannes Bergcee70132018-10-16 11:24:47 +02003634 *
3635 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
3636 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003637 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003638struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02003639 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3640 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3641 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003642 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003643 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003644#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3645 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3646 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02003647 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003648#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003649 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003650 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003651 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3652 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02003653 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003654 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003655 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02003656 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003657 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3658 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3659 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3660 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02003661
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003662 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3663 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3664
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003665 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00003666 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003667 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3668 unsigned int changed_flags,
3669 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003670 u64 multicast);
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003671 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3672 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3673 unsigned int filter_flags,
3674 unsigned int changed_flags);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003675 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3676 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04003677 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003678 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003679 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003680 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003681 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3682 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3683 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3684 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003685 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3686 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3687 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003688 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3689 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003690 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003691 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003692 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3693 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003694 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3695 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3696 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003697 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003698 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003699 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003700 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3701 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3702 const u8 *mac_addr);
3703 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3704 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003705 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3706 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003707 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3708 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3709 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003710 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003711 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003712 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3713 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3714 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3715 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303716#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3717 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3718 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3719 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3720 struct dentry *dir);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece62012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303721#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003722 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003723 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003724 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3725 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3726 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3727 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003728 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3729 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3730 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003731 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3732 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3733 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3734 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003735 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3736 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3737 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003738 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3739 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3740 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3741 struct station_info *sinfo);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003742 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003743 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003744 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003745 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3746 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3747 u64 tsf);
Pedersen, Thomas354d3812016-09-28 16:56:28 -07003748 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3749 s64 offset);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003750 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003751 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg57eeb202017-01-13 11:12:01 +01003752
3753 /**
3754 * @ampdu_action:
3755 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
3756 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3757 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3758 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3759 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
3760 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
3761 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3762 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3763 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3764 *
3765 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
3766 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1)
3767 * - ``TX: 8..1...``
3768 *
3769 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3770 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3771 *
3772 * - ``TX: 1 or``
3773 * - ``TX: 18 or``
3774 * - ``TX: 81``
3775 *
3776 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3777 *
3778 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3779 * The callback can sleep.
3780 */
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003781 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003782 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003783 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003784 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3785 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003786 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003787 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003788#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003789 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3790 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003791 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3792 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3793 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003794#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003795 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3796 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003797 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003798 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003799 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003800 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3801 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003802
3803 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003804 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003805 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003806 int duration,
3807 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003808 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003809 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3810 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3811 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303812 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303813 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3814 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003815 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3816 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3817 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003818
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003819 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3820 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3821 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3822 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3823 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003824 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3825 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3826 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3827 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3828 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003829
3830 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3831 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3832 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3833 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3834 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3835 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3836 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3837 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003838
3839 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Ilan Peerd4e36e52018-04-20 13:49:25 +03003840 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3841 u16 duration);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003842
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003843 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3844 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3845
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003846 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3847 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3848 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3849 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3850 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3851 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3852 u32 changed);
3853 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3854 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3855 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3856 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3857 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3858 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003859 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3860 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3861 int n_vifs,
3862 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003863
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003864 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3865 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003866
3867#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3868 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3869 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3870 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3871#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003872 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3873 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3874 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003875 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3876 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3877 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003878
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003879 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3880 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3881
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003882 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3883 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Maxim Altshul2439ca02016-08-04 15:43:04 +03003884 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3885 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003886 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3887 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003888
3889 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3890 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3891 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3892 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003893 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003894 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3895 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3896 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003897 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3898 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3899 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003900
Johannes Berge7881bd52017-12-19 10:11:54 +01003901 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3902 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Sara Sharonf59374e2016-03-02 23:46:14 +02003903 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ayala Beker708d50e2016-09-20 17:31:14 +03003904
3905 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3906 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3907 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
3908 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3909 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Ayala Beker5953ff62016-09-20 17:31:19 +03003910 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3911 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3912 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03003913 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3914 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3915 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
3916 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3917 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3918 u8 instance_id);
Sara Sharon9739fe22018-09-05 08:06:11 +03003919 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3920 struct sk_buff *head,
3921 struct sk_buff *skb);
Pradeep Kumar Chitrapubc847972018-10-03 20:19:20 -07003922 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3923 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3924 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
Johannes Bergcee70132018-10-16 11:24:47 +02003925 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3926 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
3927 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3928 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003929};
3930
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003931/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003932 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3933 *
3934 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3935 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3936 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3937 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3938 * @priv_data_len.
3939 *
3940 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3941 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3942 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3943 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3944 *
3945 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3946 */
3947struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3948 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3949 const char *requested_name);
3950
3951/**
3952 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003953 *
3954 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3955 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3956 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3957 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3958 * @priv_data_len.
3959 *
3960 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3961 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003962 *
3963 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003964 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003965static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003966struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003967 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3968{
3969 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3970}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003971
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003972/**
3973 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3974 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003975 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3976 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3977 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003978 *
3979 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003980 *
3981 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003982 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003983int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3984
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003985/**
3986 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3987 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3988 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3989 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3990 */
3991struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3992 int throughput;
3993 int blink_time;
3994};
3995
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003996/**
3997 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3998 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3999 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4000 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4001 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4002 */
4003enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4004 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
4005 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
4006 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
4007};
4008
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004009#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02004010const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4011const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4012const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4013const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4014const char *
4015__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4016 unsigned int flags,
4017 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4018 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004019#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004020/**
4021 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4022 *
4023 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4024 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4025 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4026 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4027 *
4028 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004029 *
4030 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004031 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02004032static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004033{
4034#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4035 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4036#else
4037 return NULL;
4038#endif
4039}
4040
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004041/**
4042 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4043 *
4044 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4045 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4046 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4047 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4048 *
4049 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004050 *
4051 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004052 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02004053static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004054{
4055#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4056 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4057#else
4058 return NULL;
4059#endif
4060}
4061
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01004062/**
4063 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4064 *
4065 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4066 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4067 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4068 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4069 *
4070 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004071 *
4072 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01004073 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02004074static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02004075{
4076#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4077 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4078#else
4079 return NULL;
4080#endif
4081}
4082
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01004083/**
4084 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4085 *
4086 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4087 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4088 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4089 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4090 *
4091 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004092 *
4093 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01004094 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02004095static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Ivo van Doorncdcb006f2008-01-07 19:45:24 +01004096{
4097#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4098 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4099#else
4100 return NULL;
4101#endif
4102}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02004103
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004104/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01004105 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4106 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01004107 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01004108 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4109 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4110 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004111 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4112 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4113 *
4114 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01004115 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02004116static inline const char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01004117ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01004118 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4119 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4120{
4121#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01004122 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01004123 blink_table_len);
4124#else
4125 return NULL;
4126#endif
4127}
4128
4129/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004130 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4131 *
4132 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4133 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4134 *
4135 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4136 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004137void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4138
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004139/**
4140 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4141 *
4142 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4143 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004144 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004145 *
4146 * @hw: the hardware to free
4147 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004148void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4149
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02004150/**
4151 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4152 *
4153 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4154 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4155 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4156 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4157 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4158 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4159 *
4160 * @hw: the hardware to restart
4161 */
4162void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4163
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01004164/**
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004165 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04004166 *
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004167 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4168 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4169 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4170 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4171 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4172 *
4173 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4174 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4175 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4176 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4177 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4178 *
4179 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4180 *
4181 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03004182 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004183 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4184 * @napi: the NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04004185 */
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03004186void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4187 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04004188
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004189/**
4190 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4191 *
4192 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b3f2010-03-29 17:35:07 +08004193 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4194 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4195 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4196 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004197 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004198 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004199 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4200 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004201 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4202 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004203 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004204 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02004205 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004206 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4207 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004208 */
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004209static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4210{
Johannes Bergd63b5482016-03-31 20:02:02 +03004211 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02004212}
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004213
4214/**
4215 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4216 *
4217 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004218 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4219 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004220 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004221 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4222 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004223 *
4224 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4225 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004226 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02004227void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004228
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004229/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004230 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4231 *
4232 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4233 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4234 *
4235 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004236 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4237 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004238 *
4239 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4240 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4241 */
4242static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4243 struct sk_buff *skb)
4244{
4245 local_bh_disable();
4246 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4247 local_bh_enable();
4248}
4249
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004250/**
4251 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4252 *
4253 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4254 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4255 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4256 *
4257 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4258 *
4259 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4260 * each other.
4261 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004262 * @sta: currently connected sta
4263 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004264 *
4265 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004266 */
4267int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4268
4269/**
4270 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4271 * (in process context)
4272 *
4273 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4274 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4275 * applies.
4276 *
4277 * @sta: currently connected sta
4278 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004279 *
4280 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02004281 */
4282static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4283 bool start)
4284{
4285 int ret;
4286
4287 local_bh_disable();
4288 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4289 local_bh_enable();
4290
4291 return ret;
4292}
4293
Johannes Berg46fa38e2016-05-03 16:58:00 +03004294/**
4295 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4296 * @sta: currently connected station
4297 *
4298 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4299 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4300 * connected station was received.
4301 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4302 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4303 * be serialized.
4304 */
4305void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4306
4307/**
4308 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4309 * @sta: currently connected station
4310 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4311 *
4312 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4313 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4314 * from a connected station was received.
4315 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4316 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4317 * serialized.
Emmanuel Grumbach0aa419e2016-10-18 23:12:10 +03004318 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4319 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4320 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4321 * checks.
Johannes Berg46fa38e2016-05-03 16:58:00 +03004322 */
4323void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4324
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004325/*
4326 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4327 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4328 */
Felix Fietkau651b9922018-02-10 13:20:34 +01004329#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4)
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01004330
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03004331/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004332 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07004333 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004334 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4335 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004336 *
4337 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004338 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4339 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004340 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004341 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4342 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4343 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4344 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4345 *
4346 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4347 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4348 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4349 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4350 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4351 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4352 *
4353 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4354 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4355 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4356 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4357 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004358 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02004359void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4360 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02004361
4362/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02004363 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4364 *
4365 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4366 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4367 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4368 *
4369 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4370 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4371 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4372 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4373 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4374 */
4375void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4376 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4377 struct sk_buff *skb,
4378 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4379 int max_rates);
4380
4381/**
Toke Høiland-Jørgensen484a54c2017-04-06 11:38:26 +02004382 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4383 *
4384 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4385 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4386 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4387 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4388 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4389 * slow stations to starve).
4390 *
4391 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4392 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4393 */
4394void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4395 u32 thr);
4396
4397/**
Anilkumar Kollif8252e72018-10-11 18:15:03 +05304398 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4399 *
4400 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4401 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4402 * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4403 *
4404 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4405 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4406 * @info: tx status information
4407 */
4408void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4409 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4410 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4411
4412/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004413 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4414 *
4415 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4416 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4417 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4418 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004419 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4420 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004421 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004422 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4423 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004424 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004425 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4426 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004427 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004428void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004429 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004430
4431/**
Felix Fietkau5fe49a92017-04-26 17:11:37 +02004432 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4433 *
4434 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4435 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4436 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4437 *
4438 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4439 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4440 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4441 *
4442 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4443 * @status: tx status information
4444 */
4445void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4446 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4447
4448/**
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01004449 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4450 *
4451 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4452 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4453 * specific skbs.
4454 *
4455 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4456 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4457 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4458 *
4459 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4460 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4461 * (NULL for multicast packets)
4462 * @info: tx status information
4463 */
Felix Fietkau5fe49a92017-04-26 17:11:37 +02004464static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4465 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4466 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4467{
4468 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4469 .sta = sta,
4470 .info = info,
4471 };
4472
4473 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4474}
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01004475
4476/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004477 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4478 *
4479 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4480 *
4481 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4482 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4483 * for a single hardware.
4484 *
4485 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4486 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4487 */
4488static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4489 struct sk_buff *skb)
4490{
4491 local_bh_disable();
4492 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4493 local_bh_enable();
4494}
4495
4496/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004497 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004498 *
4499 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4500 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4501 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004502 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4503 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004504 *
4505 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4506 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004507 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004508void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004509 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004510
4511/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004512 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4513 *
4514 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4515 * connected STA.
4516 *
4517 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4518 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4519 */
4520void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4521
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004522#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4523
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004524/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004525 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4526 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4527 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03004528 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4529 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
4530 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004531 */
4532struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4533 u16 tim_offset;
4534 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004535
4536 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004537};
4538
4539/**
4540 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4541 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4542 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4543 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4544 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4545 *
4546 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4547 * obtain the beacon template.
4548 *
4549 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4550 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004551 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4552 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004553 *
4554 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4555 *
4556 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4557 */
4558struct sk_buff *
4559ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4560 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4561 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4562
4563/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004564 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4565 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004566 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004567 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4568 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4569 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4570 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4571 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4572 *
4573 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004574 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004575 *
4576 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4577 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004578 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4579 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004580 *
4581 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004582 *
4583 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004584 */
4585struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4586 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4587 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4588
4589/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004590 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4591 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004592 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004593 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004594 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004595 *
4596 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004597 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb942009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004598static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4599 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4600{
4601 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4602}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004603
4604/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004605 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4606 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4607 *
4608 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4609 * This function is called implicitly when
4610 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4611 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4612 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4613 *
4614 * Return: new csa counter value
4615 */
4616u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4617
4618/**
Gregory Greenman03737002018-04-20 13:49:24 +03004619 * ieee80211_csa_set_counter - request mac80211 to set csa counter
4620 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4621 * @counter: the new value for the counter
4622 *
4623 * The csa counter can be changed by the device, this API should be
4624 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
4625 *
4626 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_csa_update_counter(),
4627 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
4628 */
4629void ieee80211_csa_set_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
4630
4631/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004632 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4633 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4634 *
4635 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004636 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004637 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4638 */
4639void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4640
4641/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004642 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004643 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4644 *
4645 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4646 */
4647bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4648
4649
4650/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004651 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4652 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4653 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4654 *
4655 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4656 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4657 *
4658 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004659 *
4660 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004661 */
4662struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4663 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4664
4665/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004666 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4667 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4668 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4669 *
4670 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4671 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4672 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4673 *
4674 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4675 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004676 *
4677 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004678 */
4679struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4680 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4681
4682/**
4683 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4684 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4685 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg7b6ddea2017-11-21 14:46:08 +01004686 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
4687 * if at all possible
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004688 *
4689 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4690 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4691 * BSSID and address is used.
4692 *
Johannes Berg7b6ddea2017-11-21 14:46:08 +01004693 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
4694 * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
4695 *
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004696 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4697 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004698 *
4699 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004700 */
4701struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg7b6ddea2017-11-21 14:46:08 +01004702 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4703 bool qos_ok);
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004704
4705/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004706 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4707 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004708 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004709 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4710 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004711 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004712 *
4713 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4714 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004715 *
4716 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004717 */
4718struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004719 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004720 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004721 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004722
4723/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004724 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4725 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004726 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004727 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4728 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004729 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004730 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4731 *
4732 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4733 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4734 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4735 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4736 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004737void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004738 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004739 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004740 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4741
4742/**
4743 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4744 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004745 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004746 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004747 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004748 *
4749 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4750 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4751 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004752 *
4753 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004754 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004755__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4756 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004757 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004758
4759/**
4760 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4761 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004762 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004763 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4764 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004765 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004766 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4767 *
4768 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4769 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4770 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4771 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4772 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004773void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4774 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004775 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004776 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004777 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4778
4779/**
4780 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4781 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004782 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004783 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004784 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004785 *
4786 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4787 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4788 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004789 *
4790 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004791 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004792__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4793 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004794 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004795 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004796
4797/**
4798 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4799 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004800 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02004801 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004802 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004803 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004804 *
4805 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4806 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004807 *
4808 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004809 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004810__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4811 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02004812 enum nl80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004813 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004814 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004815
4816/**
4817 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4818 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004819 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004820 *
4821 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4822 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4823 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4824 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004825 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4826 *
4827 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4828 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004829 *
4830 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4831 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4832 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4833 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4834 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4835 * use common code for all beacons.
4836 */
4837struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004838ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004839
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004840/**
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004841 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4842 *
4843 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4844 *
4845 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4846 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4847 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4848 */
4849void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4850 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4851
4852/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004853 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004854 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004855 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4856 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004857 *
4858 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004859 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4860 * with this P1K
4861 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004862 */
Johannes Berg42d987952011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004863static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4864 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4865{
4866 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4867 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4868 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4869
4870 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4871}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004872
4873/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004874 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4875 *
4876 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4877 * and transmitter address.
4878 *
4879 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4880 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4881 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4882 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4883 */
4884void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4885 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4886
4887/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004888 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4889 *
4890 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4891 * in the packet.
4892 *
4893 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4894 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4895 * encrypted with this key
4896 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4897 */
4898void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4899 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004900
4901/**
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02004902 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
4903 *
4904 * @pos: start of crypto header
4905 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4906 * @pn: PN to add
4907 *
4908 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
4909 * the packet payload)
4910 *
4911 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
4912 * point to the crypto header)
4913 */
4914u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
4915
4916/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004917 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4918 *
4919 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004920 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004921 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4922 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4923 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4924 *
4925 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4926 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4927 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4928 *
4929 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4930 * can be done concurrently.
4931 */
4932void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4933 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4934
4935/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004936 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4937 *
4938 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004939 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004940 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4941 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4942 * @seq: new sequence data
4943 *
4944 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4945 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4946 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4947 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4948 *
4949 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4950 * can be done concurrently.
4951 */
4952void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4953 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4954
4955/**
4956 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4957 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4958 *
4959 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4960 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4961 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4962 *
4963 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4964 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4965 */
4966void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4967
4968/**
4969 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4970 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4971 * @keyconf: new key data
4972 *
4973 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4974 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4975 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4976 *
4977 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4978 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4979 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4980 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4981 *
4982 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4983 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4984 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4985 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4986 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4987 * of the reconfiguration.
4988 *
4989 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4990 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4991 *
4992 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4993 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4994 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4995 * the key that's being replaced.
4996 */
4997struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4998ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4999 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5000
5001/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02005002 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5003 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5004 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5005 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5006 * @gfp: allocation flags
5007 */
5008void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5009 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5010
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd42008-03-20 15:06:41 +02005011/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005012 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5013 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5014 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5015 *
5016 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5017 */
5018void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5019
5020/**
5021 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5022 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5023 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5024 *
5025 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5026 */
5027void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5028
5029/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03005030 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5031 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5032 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5033 *
5034 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005035 *
5036 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03005037 */
5038
5039int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5040
5041/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005042 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5043 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5044 *
5045 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5046 */
5047void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5048
5049/**
5050 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5051 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5052 *
5053 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5054 */
5055void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5056
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04005057/**
5058 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5059 *
5060 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5061 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02005062 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5063 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04005064 *
5065 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Avraham Stern7947d3e2016-07-05 15:23:12 +03005066 * @info: information about the completed scan
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04005067 */
Avraham Stern7947d3e2016-07-05 15:23:12 +03005068void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5069 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005070
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01005071/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03005072 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5073 *
5074 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5075 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5076 *
5077 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5078 */
5079void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5080
5081/**
5082 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5083 *
5084 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5085 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5086 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5087 * while associating, for instance.
5088 *
5089 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5090 */
5091void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5092
5093/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005094 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5095 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5096 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5097 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5098 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5099 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5100 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5101 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02005102 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005103 */
5104enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5105 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
5106 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02005107 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005108};
5109
5110/**
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02005111 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5112 *
5113 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5114 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5115 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5116 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5117 *
5118 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5119 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5120 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5121 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5122 */
5123void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5124 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5125 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5126 void *data);
5127
5128/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07005129 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01005130 *
5131 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5132 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02005133 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5134 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5135 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005136 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01005137 *
5138 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005139 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02005140 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01005141 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5142 */
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02005143static inline void
5144ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5145 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5146 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5147 void *data)
5148{
5149 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5150 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5151 iterator, data);
5152}
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01005153
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005154/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02005155 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5156 *
5157 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5158 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5159 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5160 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005161 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02005162 *
5163 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005164 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02005165 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5166 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5167 */
5168void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01005169 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02005170 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5171 u8 *mac,
5172 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5173 void *data);
5174
5175/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02005176 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
5177 *
5178 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5179 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5180 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
5181 *
5182 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5183 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5184 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5185 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5186 */
5187void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5188 u32 iter_flags,
5189 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5190 u8 *mac,
5191 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5192 void *data);
5193
5194/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03005195 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5196 *
5197 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5198 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5199 * function for them.
5200 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5201 *
5202 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5203 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5204 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5205 */
5206void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5207 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5208 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5209 void *data);
5210/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04005211 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5212 *
5213 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5214 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5215 *
5216 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5217 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5218 */
5219void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5220
5221/**
5222 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5223 *
5224 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5225 * workqueue.
5226 *
5227 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5228 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5229 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5230 */
5231void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5232 struct delayed_work *dwork,
5233 unsigned long delay);
5234
5235/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005236 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005237 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005238 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05305239 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07005240 *
5241 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005242 *
5243 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5244 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5245 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5246 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05305247int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5248 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005249
5250/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005251 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005252 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005253 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5254 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5255 *
5256 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02005257 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5258 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005259 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005260void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005261 u16 tid);
5262
5263/**
5264 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005265 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005266 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07005267 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02005268 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005269 *
5270 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5271 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5272 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5273 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02005274int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005275
5276/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005277 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005278 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005279 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5280 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5281 *
5282 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02005283 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5284 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005285 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01005286void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02005287 u16 tid);
5288
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07005289/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005290 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5291 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005292 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005293 * @addr: station's address
5294 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005295 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5296 *
5297 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005298 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5299 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005300struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02005301 const u8 *addr);
5302
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005303/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005304 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005305 *
5306 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005307 * @addr: remote station's address
5308 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005309 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005310 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5311 *
5312 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005313 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5314 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005315 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5316 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5317 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5318 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5319 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5320 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5321 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005322 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005323 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005324 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07005325struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5326 const u8 *addr,
5327 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01005328
5329/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01005330 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5331 * @hw: the hardware
5332 * @pubsta: the station
5333 * @block: whether to block or unblock
5334 *
5335 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5336 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5337 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5338 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5339 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5340 *
5341 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5342 * manner.
5343 *
5344 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5345 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5346 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5347 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5348 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5349 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5350 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5351 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5352 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5353 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5354 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5355 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5356 * woke up while blocked or not.
5357 */
5358void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5359 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5360
5361/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005362 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5363 * @pubsta: the station
5364 *
5365 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5366 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5367 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5368 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5369 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01005370 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5371 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5372 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5373 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5374 *
5375 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5376 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5377 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5378 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005379 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01005380void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02005381
5382/**
Emmanuel Grumbach0ead2512015-11-17 10:24:36 +02005383 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5384 * @pubsta: the station
5385 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5386 *
5387 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5388 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5389 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5390 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5391 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5392 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5393 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5394 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5395 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5396 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5397 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5398 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5399 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5400 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5401 */
5402void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5403
5404/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005405 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5406 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5407 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5408 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5409 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5410 *
5411 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5412 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5413 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5414 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5415 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5416 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02005417 *
5418 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5419 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5420 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02005421 */
5422void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5423 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5424 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5425 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5426 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5427 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5428 void *data),
5429 void *iter_data);
5430
5431/**
Eliad Pelleref044762015-11-17 10:24:37 +02005432 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5433 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5434 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5435 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5436 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5437 *
5438 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5439 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5440 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5441 * in removal process will be skipped.
5442 *
5443 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5444 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5445 */
5446void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5447 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5448 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5449 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5450 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5451 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5452 void *data),
5453 void *iter_data);
5454
5455/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005456 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5457 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5458 * @iter: iterator function
5459 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5460 *
5461 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5462 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5463 * places while calling into the driver.
5464 *
5465 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5466 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5467 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01005468 *
5469 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5470 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5471 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5472 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005473 */
5474void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5475 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5476 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5477 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5478 void *data),
5479 void *iter_data);
5480
5481/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005482 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5483 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5484 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5485 *
5486 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5487 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5488 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5489 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5490 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005491 * %NULL.
5492 *
5493 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005494 */
5495struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5496 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5497
5498/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005499 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5500 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005501 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005502 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005503 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005504 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005505 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5506 */
5507void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005508
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005509/**
5510 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5511 *
5512 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5513 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005514 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005515 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5516 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01005517 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5518 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005519 *
5520 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5521 * without connection recovery attempts.
5522 */
5523void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5524
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005525/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02005526 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5527 *
5528 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5529 *
5530 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5531 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5532 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5533 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5534 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5535 *
5536 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5537 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5538 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5539 * disconnect normally later.
5540 *
5541 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5542 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5543 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5544 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5545 */
5546void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5547
5548/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005549 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5550 * rssi threshold triggered
5551 *
5552 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5553 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
Andrzej Zaborowski769f07d2017-01-25 12:43:40 +01005554 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005555 * @gfp: context flags
5556 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01005557 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005558 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5559 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5560 */
5561void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5562 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
Andrzej Zaborowski769f07d2017-01-25 12:43:40 +01005563 s32 rssi_level,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005564 gfp_t gfp);
5565
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005566/**
Johannes Berg98f03342014-11-26 12:42:02 +01005567 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5568 *
5569 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5570 * @gfp: context flags
5571 */
5572void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5573
5574/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01005575 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5576 *
5577 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5578 */
5579void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5580
5581/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005582 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5583 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5584 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5585 *
5586 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5587 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5588 */
5589void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5590
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005591/**
5592 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5593 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02005594 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005595 *
5596 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5597 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5598 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5599 */
5600void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5601 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5602
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02005603/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01005604 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5605 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5606 */
5607void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5608
5609/**
5610 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5611 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5612 */
5613void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5614
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03005615/**
5616 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5617 *
5618 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5619 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5620 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5621 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5622 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5623 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5624 *
5625 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5626 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5627 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5628 */
5629void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5630 const u8 *addr);
5631
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005632/**
Sara Sharon06470f72016-01-28 16:19:25 +02005633 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5634 * @pubsta: station struct
5635 * @tid: the session's TID
5636 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5637 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
5638 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5639 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5640 *
5641 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5642 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5643 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5644 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5645 */
5646void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5647 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5648 u16 received_mpdus);
5649
5650/**
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005651 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5652 *
5653 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5654 * buffer.
5655 *
5656 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5657 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5658 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5659 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5660 */
5661void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5662
Luca Coelho1272c5d2017-08-18 15:33:56 +03005663/**
5664 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
5665 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5666 * @addr: station mac address
5667 * @tid: the rx tid
5668 */
Johannes Berg699cb582017-05-30 16:34:46 +02005669void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
Luca Coelho1272c5d2017-08-18 15:33:56 +03005670 unsigned int tid);
Johannes Berg699cb582017-05-30 16:34:46 +02005671
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005672/**
5673 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5674 *
5675 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5676 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5677 * reordering.
5678 *
5679 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5680 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5681 *
5682 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5683 * @addr: station mac address
5684 * @tid: the rx tid
5685 */
Johannes Berg699cb582017-05-30 16:34:46 +02005686static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5687 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5688{
5689 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5690 return;
5691 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
5692}
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005693
5694/**
5695 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5696 *
5697 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5698 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5699 * reordering.
5700 *
5701 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5702 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5703 *
5704 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5705 * @addr: station mac address
5706 * @tid: the rx tid
5707 */
Johannes Berg699cb582017-05-30 16:34:46 +02005708static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5709 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5710{
5711 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5712 return;
5713 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
5714}
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005715
Naftali Goldstein04c2cf32017-07-11 10:07:25 +03005716/**
5717 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
5718 *
5719 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
5720 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
5721 *
5722 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
5723 *
5724 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5725 * @addr: station mac address
5726 * @tid: the rx tid
5727 */
5728void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5729 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
5730
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005731/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005732
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005733/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005734 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005735 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005736 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5737 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5738 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005739 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5740 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005741 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5742 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5743 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5744 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5745 * RTS threshold
5746 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5747 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005748 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005749 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005750 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005751 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005752struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5753 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5754 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5755 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5756 struct sk_buff *skb;
5757 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5758 bool rts, short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005759 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005760 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005761 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005762};
5763
Johannes Berg09b4a4f2018-08-31 11:31:17 +03005764/**
5765 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
5766 */
5767enum rate_control_capabilities {
5768 /**
5769 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
5770 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
5771 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
5772 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
5773 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
5774 */
5775 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
5776};
5777
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005778struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg09b4a4f2018-08-31 11:31:17 +03005779 unsigned long capa;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005780 const char *name;
5781 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005782 void (*free)(void *priv);
5783
5784 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5785 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005786 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005787 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05305788 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005789 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02005790 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5791 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005792 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5793 void *priv_sta);
5794
Felix Fietkau18fb84d2017-04-26 17:11:35 +02005795 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
5796 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5797 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005798 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5799 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5800 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005801 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5802 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005803
5804 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5805 struct dentry *dir);
5806 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02005807
5808 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005809};
5810
5811static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg57fbcce2016-04-12 15:56:15 +02005812 enum nl80211_band band,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005813 int index)
5814{
5815 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5816}
5817
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07005818/**
5819 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5820 *
5821 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5822 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5823 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5824 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5825 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5826 * not null.
5827 *
5828 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5829 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5830 *
5831 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5832 * that this may be null.
5833 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5834 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5835 */
5836bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5837 void *priv_sta,
5838 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5839
5840
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005841static inline s8
5842rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5843 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5844{
5845 int i;
5846
5847 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5848 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5849 return i;
5850
5851 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005852 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005853
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005854 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005855 return 0;
5856}
5857
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07005858static inline
5859bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5860 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5861{
5862 unsigned int i;
5863
5864 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5865 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5866 return true;
5867 return false;
5868}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005869
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02005870/**
5871 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5872 *
5873 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5874 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5875 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5876 * the most recent rate control module decision.
5877 *
5878 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5879 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5880 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
5881 */
5882int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5883 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5884 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
5885
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01005886int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5887void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005888
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005889static inline bool
5890conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5891{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005892 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005893}
5894
5895static inline bool
5896conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5897{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005898 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5899 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005900}
5901
5902static inline bool
5903conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5904{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005905 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5906 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005907}
5908
5909static inline bool
5910conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5911{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005912 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005913}
5914
5915static inline bool
5916conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5917{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02005918 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5919 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5920 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005921}
5922
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02005923static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5924ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5925{
5926 if (p2p) {
5927 switch (type) {
5928 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5929 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5930 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5931 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5932 default:
5933 break;
5934 }
5935 }
5936 return type;
5937}
5938
5939static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5940ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5941{
5942 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5943}
5944
Sara Sharon65554d02016-02-16 12:48:17 +02005945/**
5946 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
5947 *
5948 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5949 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
5950 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
5951 *
5952 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
5953 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
5954 * matching GroupId management frame.
5955 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
5956 */
5957void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5958 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
5959
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07005960void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5961 int rssi_min_thold,
5962 int rssi_max_thold);
5963
5964void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03005965
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005966/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005967 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005968 *
5969 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5970 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005971 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5972 *
5973 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5974 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005975 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07005976int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5977
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01005978/**
5979 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5980 * @vif: virtual interface
5981 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5982 * @gfp: allocation flags
5983 *
5984 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5985 */
5986void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5987 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5988 gfp_t gfp);
5989
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005990/**
5991 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5992 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5993 * @vif: virtual interface
5994 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5995 * @band: the band to transmit on
5996 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5997 *
5998 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5999 */
6000bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6001 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6002 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6003
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01006004/**
6005 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6006 *
6007 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6008 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6009 *
6010 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6011 *
6012 * private:
6013 *
6014 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6015 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6016 */
6017struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6018 u32 next_tsf;
6019 bool has_next_tsf;
6020
6021 u8 absent;
6022
6023 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6024 struct {
6025 u32 start;
6026 u32 duration;
6027 u32 interval;
6028 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6029};
6030
6031/**
6032 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6033 *
6034 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6035 * @data: NoA tracking data
6036 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6037 *
6038 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6039 */
6040int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6041 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6042
6043/**
6044 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6045 *
6046 * @data: NoA tracking data
6047 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6048 */
6049void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6050
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03006051/**
6052 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6053 * @vif: virtual interface
6054 * @peer: the peer's destination address
6055 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6056 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6057 * @gfp: allocation flags
6058 *
6059 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6060 */
6061void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6062 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6063 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03006064
6065/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02006066 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6067 *
6068 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6069 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6070 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6071 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6072 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6073 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6074 *
6075 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6076 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6077 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6078 *
6079 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6080 * @tid: the TID to reserve
6081 *
6082 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6083 */
6084int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6085
6086/**
6087 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6088 *
6089 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6090 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6091 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6092 *
6093 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6094 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6095 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6096 *
6097 * @sta: the station
6098 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6099 */
6100void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6101
6102/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01006103 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6104 *
6105 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Johannes Berge7881bd52017-12-19 10:11:54 +01006106 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01006107 *
6108 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
Johannes Bergfca12792018-12-15 11:03:08 +02006109 *
6110 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6111 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6112 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by by RCU and thus the
6113 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6114 * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6115 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6116 * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01006117 */
6118struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6119 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Michal Kaziorf2ac7e302016-01-27 15:26:12 +01006120
6121/**
6122 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6123 *
6124 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6125 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6126 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6127 *
6128 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6129 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6130 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6131 */
6132void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6133 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6134 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
Ayala Beker167e33f2016-09-20 17:31:20 +03006135
6136/**
6137 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6138 *
6139 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6140 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6141 *
6142 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6143 * @inst_id: the local instance id
6144 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6145 * @gfp: allocation flags
6146 */
6147void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6148 u8 inst_id,
6149 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6150 gfp_t gfp);
Ayala Beker92bc43b2016-09-20 17:31:21 +03006151
6152/**
6153 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6154 *
6155 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6156 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6157 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6158 *
6159 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6160 * @match: match event information
6161 * @gfp: allocation flags
6162 */
6163void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6164 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6165 gfp_t gfp);
6166
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07006167#endif /* MAC80211_H */